
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=173.10.69.157</id>
	<title>High5Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=173.10.69.157"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/173.10.69.157"/>
	<updated>2026-05-04T19:12:24Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.11</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Module_Guides&amp;diff=1420</id>
		<title>SME Module Guides</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Module_Guides&amp;diff=1420"/>
		<updated>2011-06-23T16:30:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|style= cellpadding=&amp;quot;8&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:CustomersIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Customers module tracks every aspect &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;of your most valuable asset, your customers.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Maintenance Contracts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customer Equipment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ServiceOrdersIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service and Install Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Create service or install orders for your customers.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Also setup recurring service orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Service &amp;amp; Install Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dispatch Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projects]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME and QuickBooks Sync&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Synchronization between SME with QuickBooks&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;for a full business solution&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SQLink]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SQLink FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Common SQLink Errors]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|style= cellpadding=&amp;quot;8&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:InventoryIcon.png]]  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
A complete collection of comprehensive&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;inventory control tools allowing you to quickly&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; and easily manage your entire inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Material Allocation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Packages]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Services]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Vendors]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Returns]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Transfers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;[[File:InvoicesIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Convert service orders to invoices or create a new&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;itemized invoice. Setup recurring&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;invoices linked to maintenance contracts.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Invoicing]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Common / Other&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There are tools in SME you will use throughout&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;all the modules. &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Activities]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Stored Documents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Custom Tabs and Fields]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Search Window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Navigate Button]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Arrange Grids]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|style= cellpadding=&amp;quot;8&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Setup SME to fit your business. Setup User&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Groups, assign usernames and passwords.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Company]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User Groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Users]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User Preferences]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ReportsIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Learn how to copy a standard report and customize&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;to fit your business&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Duplicating Standard Reports for Custom Use]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help Desk Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Track issues and build your knowledge base in the &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Help Desk module.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help Desk]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 Wiki &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Welcome to High5 Wiki]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[Wiki Books]] link for a more organized grouping of information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Module_Guides&amp;diff=1398</id>
		<title>SME Module Guides</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Module_Guides&amp;diff=1398"/>
		<updated>2011-06-21T15:30:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|style= cellpadding=&amp;quot;8&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:CustomersIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The Customers module tracks every aspect &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;of your most valuable asset, your customers.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Maintenance Contracts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customer Equipment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ServiceOrdersIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service and Install Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Create service or install orders for your customers.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Also setup recurring service orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Service &amp;amp; Install Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projects]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME and QuickBooks Sync&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Synchronization between SME with QuickBooks&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;for a full business solution&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SQLink]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SQLink FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Common SQLink Errors]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|style= cellpadding=&amp;quot;8&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:InventoryIcon.png]]  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
A complete collection of comprehensive&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;inventory control tools allowing you to quickly&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; and easily manage your entire inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Material Allocation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Packages]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Services]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Vendors]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Returns]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Transfers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;[[File:InvoicesIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Convert service orders to invoices or create a new&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;itemized invoice. Setup recurring&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;invoices linked to maintenance contracts.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Invoicing]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Common / Other&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
There are tools in SME you will use throughout&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;all the modules. &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Activities]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Stored Documents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Custom Tabs and Fields]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Search Window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Navigate Button]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Arrange Grids]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|style= cellpadding=&amp;quot;8&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Setup SME to fit your business. Setup User&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Groups, assign usernames and passwords.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Company]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User Groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Users]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User Preferences]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ReportsIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Learn how to copy a standard report and customize&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;to fit your business&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Duplicating Standard Reports for Custom Use]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help Desk Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Track issues and build your knowledge base in the &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Help Desk module.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help Desk]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 Wiki &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Welcome to High5 Wiki]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[Wiki Books]] link for a more organized grouping of information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink&amp;diff=1335</id>
		<title>SQLink</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink&amp;diff=1335"/>
		<updated>2011-06-20T15:35:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink for QuickBooks: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  SME to  QuickBooks  Link Synchronization Tool Definitions:  1) QB: QuickBooks® by Intuit® &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) SME: Service Management Enterprise by High 5 Sof...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink for QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SME to  QuickBooks  Link Synchronization Tool&lt;br /&gt;
Definitions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) QB: QuickBooks® by Intuit®&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) SME: Service Management Enterprise by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) SQLink: SME to QB synchronization program by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink for QuickBooks is a robust syncing engine linking SME and QuickBooks information. The sync process encompasses four programs:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*SME – Service Management Enterprise&lt;br /&gt;
*SQLink – SME to QuickBooks Import- Export data engine.&lt;br /&gt;
*QuickBooks by Intuit – all versions from 2004 to the current year. (Note: We have encountered some issues syncing with unsupported versions of QuickBooks . Review the following link regarding Intuit Sunset policies. [http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/knowledgebasearticle/1003113]&lt;br /&gt;
*QBFC – QuickBooks File Connector XML parsing engine. Runs behind the scenes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following information covers SME to QuickBooks Sync Points, SQLink Initial Setup, and a module list covering setup, optional settings, and troubleshooting common errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sync Points for SQLink]] - Sync points between SME and QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Initial Setup for SQLink]] - Running SQLink for the first time with your QuickBooks file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Performing the sync. The sync process can be performed in two ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SQLink Full Sync]] - How to perform the full sync process. SME to QuickBooks and QuickBooks to SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Module Sync - How to perform a module by module import/export or manual sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
QuickBooks lists have character length limitations. THe following page outlines the field length differences between SME and QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SQLink - QuickBooks Name Length limitations]] - QuickBooks Name Length Limitations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following details will be updated soon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sync details by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - Customers]] - Customer syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*[[SQLink - Vendors]] - Vendor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*[[SQLink - Employees and Technicians]] - Employee and Technician syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Inventory)) - Inventory syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Invoices)) - Invoice syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Payments)) - Payment syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Tech Time)) - Tech syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Purchase Orders)) - Purchase Order syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s)) Subcontractor syncing details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Troubleshouting errors by module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*((SQLink - Customers)) - Troubleshouting Customer errors&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Vendors)) - Troubleshouting Vendor errors&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Techs and Users)) - Troubleshouting Tech and User erors&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Inventory)) - Troubleshouting Inventory errors&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Invoices)) - Troubleshouting Invoicing errors&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Payments)) - Troubleshouting Payment errors&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Tech Time)) - Troubleshouting - Tech time entry errors&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Purchase Orders)) - Troubleshouting - Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - Subcontractor Bills and PO&amp;#039;s)) - Troubleshouting - Subcontractor Billing and Purchase Order errors&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*((SQLink - TroubleShooting Connection Issues)) - Troubleshooting Connection Issues with SQLink&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sync Points for SQLink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sync Points Between SME and QuickBooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Definitions:&lt;br /&gt;
1)   QB: QuickBooks . ® by Intuit®&lt;br /&gt;
2)   SME: Service Management Professional (version 5) by High5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
3)   SQLink: SME to QB synchronization program by High5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following table lists the synchronization points between SME and QuickBooks modules. Refer to the SQLink for QuickBooks wiki pages for detailed syncing information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 98pt; height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;130&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Customers&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full two-way sync.� Customers can be added or modified in either SME or QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Customer Balances&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full sync between SME and QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Invoices from SME&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Invoices in SME fully transfer to QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Invoices from QB&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | QuickBooks invoice goes to SME for balance purposes, no detailed items are transferred. ( QuickBooks invoices cannot be edited in SME.)&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Payments&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Can enter payments in QuickBooks for SME invoices. Payments can also be applied in QuickBooks for SME invoices. QuickBooks invoices can only be paid QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Tax Codes and Groups&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Controlled by QuickBooks . Enter new tax codes in QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Terms&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Controlled by QuickBooks . Enter new terms in QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Items in QB&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full sync of inventory, non-inventory, service, wage, and discount items.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Items in SME&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Option to sync with QuickBooks or not.� If not synced with QuickBooks inventory will use a generic default item to transfer accounting information for invoicing and purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Inventory Groups&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | SME Packages = QuickBooks Inventory Groups.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Inventory Assemblies&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Do not sync.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Weekly Timesheet&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | SME labor item records sync with QuickBooks weekly time sheet.� Customer name and job number are transferred. Time sheets must be turned on in QuickBooks to use this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Wage Items&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Synced from QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Vendors&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full sync between SME and QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Subcontractors&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Sync of 1099 vendors as Subcontractors in SME. Vendors that are Subcontractors are initially setup in QuickBooks due to sensitive information that is only maintained in QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Subcontractor Bills&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Subcontractors used on orders in SME can create a Bill in QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Subcontractor PO&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Subcontractors used on orders in SME can create a Purchase Order in QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Purchase Orders (PO)&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Optional sync with QuickBooks . Multiple syncing options.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | PO Bill&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Syncs with QuickBooks when items are received. (Partial receipt increments the Bill in QuickBooks ).&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 27.2pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;36&amp;quot; | Employees&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Sync to SME as technicians and users table. Employees are initially setup in QuickBooks due to sensitive information that is only maintained in QuickBooks .&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Class tracking&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Full sync of class tracking on all modules.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Class can be assigned to Customer, Order, Item, etc..&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Synced for use of assigning accounts for item syncing only.&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl65&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;height: 14.3pt&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;19&amp;quot; | Credit Memos&lt;br /&gt;
| class=&amp;quot;xl67&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width: 401pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;534&amp;quot; | Synced from QuickBooks . (Need to be applied to an invoice.)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Initial Setup for SQLink ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink Installation and Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
SME to  QuickBooks  Link Synchronization Tool&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Definitions:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) QB: QuickBooks® by Intuit®&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) SME: Service Management Professional (version 5) by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) SQLink: SME to QB synchronization program by High 5 Software™&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
SQLink is an add-on product to SME to synchronize SME and QB databases. For a complete list of the &lt;br /&gt;
synchronization points review the Sync Points for SQLink page.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
SME handles sales, customers, service orders, and inventory while  QuickBooks handles the accounting, payroll, and banking integration.  SME and QB together make a very powerful combination for managing your service business.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;READ OVER THIS DOCUMENT CAREFULLY.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is very critical that the interface between SME and  QuickBooks is established properly for your business. The SQLink Wizard will fill in the necessary values as defaults. It is recommended that these values remain in place unless they conflict with your business operations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your initial synchronization must take place on the computer hosting the SME database! Please plan for a time when you can complete the process without interruption from other system demands. If on a networked system install the programs on your server. If you do not have a server, designate a system to host the database, and install the programs on that system.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME/SQLink, and QuickBooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; must already be installed on the computer where you will run SQLink. If either of these programs is NOT installed, you must install the missing programs. SQLink installs with SME in the SME program folder.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Important&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;:  QuickBooks must be updated before performing the initial sync! This may mean that you will have to perform the  QuickBooks update on all other computers where  QuickBooks has been installed.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME and QuickBooks:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Must have company data filled in. If both SME and QuickBooks are installed and the QuickBooks company file has data, please proceed with these instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Suggestion:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; It is recommended to start with copies, (sandbox copies) of SME and  QuickBooks, rather than your live data until you get the synchronization settings established the way you need to match your business processes. Once all settings are correct and information is passing between the applications to your satisfaction you can setup a live sync with a fresh empty SME database.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Advised:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; To avoid possible data issues it is advised you run the  QuickBooks Verify and Backup utility prior to setting up SQLink and SME.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of initial synchronizations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#To an SME install with no prior data importing the  QuickBooks data. (Referred to as an initial sync.)&lt;br /&gt;
#To an SME installation that has been used for running your business and a QuickBooks file that has also been used to run your business without synchronization. (An in place sync.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your installation falls under number 2 please contact High5Software prior to performing the initial sync as care must be taken to clean up data that may cause issues when syncing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initial sync to a newly installed SME application:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
SQLink will install with SME in the SME program folder.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#SQLink will locate your open QuickBooks file.&lt;br /&gt;
#QuickBooks will open the Access Confirmation dialogue shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
#Note: on some versions of QuickBooks this will happen again at a later stage in the setup process.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will see the following screen in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#[[File:QB1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on ‘Yes’, always allow access even if QuickBooks is not running.&lt;br /&gt;
#Login as “Admin” (Note: Admin is the level required for SQLink to accesses QB. It is not the level users of SQLink access QB.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the “Allow this application to access personal data…” This will allow transfer of technician information to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Your settings should be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QB2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click “Continue”.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.You may get a certification warning. Click &amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039; on this screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.[[File:QB3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.You will see the following QuickBooks screen:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QB4.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.Click “Done”.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.SQLink will now be listed in the Integrated Applications List in QuicBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Set Up For Initial QuickBooks Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#SQLink will open with the Set up for Initial Company window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.[[File:QB5(1).jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.The following set up options require attention:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.Database name (Select Existing) field. Copy the database name from this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.Company Name (Select Existing or Enter New) field. Paste the database name into this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.QuickBooks Company File Location: Click the ellipse in the QuickBooks Company File location and browse to the location of your company file.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.Note: You can obtain the QuickBooks Company file location by going to QuickBooks and pressing the ‘F2’ key. This will open the Product Information screen. The company file location is in the File Information block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.[[File:QB6.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.The paths must match exactly!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On Vista and Newer operating systems you will be required to close QuickBooks before you can set the path. This is also true of Windows Server 2008.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.Enter your  Area Code&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.Select your Country. (Default is US.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.Enter your email address if you want error logs emailed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.Select your QuickBooks year&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.Click ‘Ok’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;16.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On some operating systems you may need to repeat the above steps 2 times before QuickBooks will register the company file path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink - Initial Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to the following steps to set SQLink options and complete the initial sync. Options and settings for the Initial Setup can also be configured after the initial sync. For detailed information on the implications of specific settings refer to the appropriate Wiki page.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
On Import:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On import settings cover SQLink functionality when importing information from QuickBooks for Invoices and Payments, Inactive Customers, Next Invoice Number, and Billing Name Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QB7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Merge unmatched invoices and payments:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Check this box to match QuickBooks invoices and payments. Leaving it unchecked will not import payment information from QuickBooks. (The usual setting is checked)&lt;br /&gt;
#    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Skip inactive customers on import/export:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Checking this box will keep SQLink from importing or exporting inactive customers. Since both SME and QuickBooks are programmed to work with inactive customers it is recommended that you do not check this option. (Usual status is Unchecked)&lt;br /&gt;
#    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing Name Options:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Default setting is Billing Name = Customer Name. For more info on this topic review the SQLink Customer wiki page at: [[http://high5software.com/high5bitweaver/wiki/index.php?page=SQLink+-+Customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
#   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On Export:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; On Export settings cover Tech Time and Purchase Order options.&lt;br /&gt;
#   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Include SMP items on Purchase Order:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; This option will pass the default SQLink item for that actual item used in QuickBooks if the item does not exist in QuickBooks. (Usual setting is Checked)&lt;br /&gt;
#   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Purchase Order Options.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#    Do Not Export Purchase Orders or Bills&lt;br /&gt;
#    Export Purchase Orders Only – Bills will not export&lt;br /&gt;
#    Export Purchase Orders &amp;amp; Bills&lt;br /&gt;
#   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Export Bills Only:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Since Purchase Orders require further action to tie them to Bills in QuickBooks the Bill is the method of inventory adjustment in QuickBooks. (This is the recommended setting.)&lt;br /&gt;
#Make your selections based on the above information and click ‘Next’.&lt;br /&gt;
#SQLink will import the following QuickBooks items:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Pay Methods&lt;br /&gt;
#    Sales Tax Codes&lt;br /&gt;
#    Terms&lt;br /&gt;
#    Classes&lt;br /&gt;
#    Sales Reps&lt;br /&gt;
#    Tax Code Groups&lt;br /&gt;
#    Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#    Pay Items&lt;br /&gt;
#    Discount Items&lt;br /&gt;
#    Wage Items&lt;br /&gt;
#    Employee List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Vendor List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Inventory List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Non-Inventory List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Service List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Other Charges List&lt;br /&gt;
#    Inventory Groups&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Initial Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Invoice Options: Options on this screen determine how invoices export from SME to QuickBooks. These options can be changed after the initial import.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QB8.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#   Invoice Line Items – determines what shows on the invoice for Labor, Material, and Services. These items are ‘default’ items and will be passed on the invoice should an item that is only in SME, and not in QuickBooks, be used on an invoice. (Default settings are to Show Labor, Materials, and Service.)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Line Item Order: Determines the order of information as it is exported to QuickBooks. (Usual setting is to keep Detail Order.)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Other Options:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show Services Requested. (Usual option is to Not show Services Requested.)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show Services Preformed On Invoice. Usual option is To show Services Preformed.)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Export Purchase Orders for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Use Invoice Reference Number:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Export Bills for Subcontractors&lt;br /&gt;
#    Use Invoice Reference Number&lt;br /&gt;
#    Mark Invoice as ‘To Be Printed’ in QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
#    Use ticket number for QuickBooks P.O. Number&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show Technician Name in Labor Line Item&lt;br /&gt;
#    Service Location:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show at Top&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show with Charges&lt;br /&gt;
#    Show at Bottom&lt;br /&gt;
#    Service Location:&lt;br /&gt;
#    Make your selections and press ‘Next’&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Initial Setup - Payment and Charge Buckets: Options on this screen determine which accounts SQLink will use for the following items. You do not need to select any settings at this time as these will be filled in by the SQLink initial setup wizard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QB9.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Charge Buckets&lt;br /&gt;
#    Travel Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Premium Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Other Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Freight Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Excise Charges Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Late Fees Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Credit Buckets&lt;br /&gt;
#    Prepaid Used Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Discount Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Credit Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#   Refunds Bucket&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click ‘Next’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Initial Setup - Classes &amp;amp; Miscellaneous: Options on this screen determine how default classes, time tracking accounts, wage item, and other accounts will pass information. This information will be filled in automatically when the wizard completes the import process.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QB10.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Classes&lt;br /&gt;
#    Labor Class&lt;br /&gt;
#    Material Class&lt;br /&gt;
#    Services Class&lt;br /&gt;
#    Miscellaneous Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#    Time Tracking Service Item&lt;br /&gt;
#    SMP Tax Code&lt;br /&gt;
#    Wage Items&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Pay Wage Item&lt;br /&gt;
#    Accounts&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Payment Receivable Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Payment Deposit Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Inventory Asset Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default COGS Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Service Expense Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Default Sales Income Account&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click ‘Finish’: SQLink will create SQLink default items named SMP_&amp;lt;Item name&amp;gt; in QuickBooks and then complete the importing process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: The time required to process an initial import will depend on 2 factors:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.    Number of items in QuickBooks – Customer List, Item List, &amp;amp; Invoice/Payment list. Company files with a lot of information can take hours to process the initial import. Be prepared for this eventuality when starting the syncing process.&lt;br /&gt;
2.    System resources available to QuickBooks during the sync. If you are running the sync on a system with marginal memory or one that is short on disk space there will be a significant impact on the time required to process the initial sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink will complete the following tasks:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Creating Default Values&lt;br /&gt;
#    Retrieving Tax Codes&lt;br /&gt;
#    Creating SMP_tax item&lt;br /&gt;
#    Retrieving QuickBooks Customers&lt;br /&gt;
#    Retrieving Invoices and payments&lt;br /&gt;
#    When the import is complete SQLink will return to the initial Setup tab; Import/Export Options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SQLink Setup Screens Post Import:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Import/Export Options:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QB11.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Invoice Options:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QB12.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Payments and Credits:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QB13.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes and Accounts Options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QB14.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Initial Sync is complete. Close all programs, SME, SQLink, and QuickBooks, and reopen them to process the first regular sync.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: This sync can also take a considerable length of time since status flags are initialized on all imported items. QuickBooks is not required to be in ‘Single User’/Admin mode for this sync.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer to the following Wiki page for information on processing a regular sync.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
http://high5software.com/high5bitweaver/wiki/index.php?page=SQLink+Full+Sync+&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings&amp;diff=1285</id>
		<title>Default Export to QuickBooks Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings&amp;diff=1285"/>
		<updated>2011-06-16T23:46:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, choose which forms in SME export to QuickBooks by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export on Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, new invoices in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export on Payments&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, payment entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new customers entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new vendors entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This options is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Proposals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new proposals entered in SME will export to QuickBooks as an estimate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Purchase Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;9K5J9KmqIUs&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check one of the next two options for how SME exports purchase orders to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions_POs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export for New POs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, purchase orders created in SME will export to QuickBooks as a purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;-OR-&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for New POs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, when material is received on POs in SME, SME will export a bill to QuickBooks what you owe the vendor for the part received. This is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLink_PO.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include SMP Items on Purchase Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If the inventory item on the purchase order is not in QuickBooks, then it uses the SMP Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       If you checked &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export For New Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SME, make sure you have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders Only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       If you &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;checked Default Export Bills for New Purchase Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SME, make sure you have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills Only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders &amp;amp; Bills&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – check here if you chose to default purchase orders and bills for SME purchase orders. This is uncommon.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Subcontractors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you add a service item to an order and add a subcontractor to the service, SME can either export a bill for the subcontractor in QuickBooks for the cost of the service item, or export a PO in QuickBooks for the subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubContractorOnServiceItem.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Check one of the next two options for how SME export subcontractor’s  work to QuickBooks:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions_Subcontractors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Subcontractor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like SME to generate a bill in QuickBooks for subcontractors costs, check both &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for New Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for Closed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  The bill will be for the amount in the cost field on the service item (circled in image at top of page). When the order is closed, the bill is generated in QuickBooks or when you create a new itemized invoice a bill will be generated in QuickBooks. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubcontractorBill.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-OR-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export PO for New Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – a PO is exported to QuickBooks for the subcontractor assigned to the service item on an order. This option is used by companies that have subcontractors on many service orders. Rather than generating separate bills for every order, they export purchase orders to QuickBooks. In QuickBooks, they can then add the purchase orders to one bill to pay subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLink_SubcontractorSettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.      If you are exporting Bills for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       On the Import/Export Options tab, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Closed Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click the Invoice/Proposal Options tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom of SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.      If you are exporting POs for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click the Invoice/Proposal Options tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders for Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom of SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Inventory Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory is managed in one of two ways when SME is syncing with QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;·         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As SME Only Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Items are maintained in SME and inventory Cost of Goods, Inventory Asset, and Sales Income accounts are passed through SMP_Item. (After your initial sync with QuickBooks, you will see &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMP_Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in your QuickBooks Item List. Set the income, sales, and COGS account on the SMP_Item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;·         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As SME and QuickBooks Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – inventory items are synced and are maintained in both applications. Invoicing for material in SME decreases stock in QuickBooks. Creating Purchase Orders for material in SME increase stock in QuickBooks. Manually changing stock numbers will have to be done in both SME using [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]] and also in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultExportOptions InventoryItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export for New Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Check here if you are tracking inventory items in SME &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;and&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; QuickBooks. New Inventory items added in SME will be exported to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As Inventory Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Check here if you chose to export new inventory items to QuickBooks. If not checked, the item will export to QuickBooks as a non-inventory item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The image below shows how the inventory item name and description fields sync to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryItemFields SyncToQB.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individual inventory items can be setup up with accounts other than those set as defaults in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to find the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inventory_LinkOptions.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost of Goods Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Asset Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Income Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you want this inventory item to sync to in QuickBooks with.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you checked &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export for New Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, the default inventory Cost of Goods, Inventory Asset, and Sales Income accounts in SQLink are used as the defaults for any new  inventory items entered in SME. (circled in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can choose accounts for individual inventory items on the Link Options tab as shown on the image above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQlink_InventoryItems.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to change the defaults, you can follow the steps below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Classes and Accounts Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Locate the Accounts section. (circled above)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Select the following &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;accounts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you want inventory to be the default accounts for items exporting to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
*       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Inventory Asset Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default COGS Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Sales Income Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings&amp;diff=1284</id>
		<title>Default Export to QuickBooks Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings&amp;diff=1284"/>
		<updated>2011-06-16T23:34:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, choose which forms in SME export to QuickBooks by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export on Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, new invoices in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export on Payments&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, payment entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new customers entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new vendors entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This options is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Proposals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new proposals entered in SME will export to QuickBooks as an estimate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Purchase Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;9K5J9KmqIUs&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check one of the next two options for how SME exports purchase orders to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions_POs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export for New POs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, purchase orders created in SME will export to QuickBooks as a purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;-OR-&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for New POs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, when material is received on POs in SME, SME will export a bill to QuickBooks what you owe the vendor for the part received. This is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLink_PO.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include SMP Items on Purchase Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If the inventory item on the purchase order is not in QuickBooks, then it uses the SMP Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       If you checked &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export For New Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SME, make sure you have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders Only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       If you &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;checked Default Export Bills for New Purchase Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SME, make sure you have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills Only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders &amp;amp; Bills&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – check here if you chose to default purchase orders and bills for SME purchase orders. This is uncommon.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Subcontractors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you add a service item to an order and add a subcontractor to the service, SME can either export a bill for the subcontractor in QuickBooks for the cost of the service item, or export a PO in QuickBooks for the subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubContractorOnServiceItem.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Check one of the next two options for how SME export subcontractor’s  work to QuickBooks:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions_Subcontractors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Subcontractor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like SME to generate a bill in QuickBooks for subcontractors costs, check both &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for New Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for Closed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  The bill will be for the amount in the cost field on the service item (circled in image at top of page). When the order is closed, the bill is generated in QuickBooks or when you create a new itemized invoice a bill will be generated in QuickBooks. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubcontractorBill.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-OR-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export PO for New Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – a PO is exported to QuickBooks for the subcontractor assigned to the service item on an order. This option is used by companies that have subcontractors on many service orders. Rather than generating separate bills for every order, they export purchase orders to QuickBooks. In QuickBooks, they can then add the purchase orders to one bill to pay subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLink_SubcontractorSettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.      If you are exporting Bills for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       On the Import/Export Options tab, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Closed Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click the Invoice/Proposal Options tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom of SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.      If you are exporting POs for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click the Invoice/Proposal Options tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders for Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom of SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Inventory Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory is managed in one of two ways when SME is syncing with QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;·         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As SME Only Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Items are maintained in SME and inventory Cost of Goods, Inventory Asset, and Sales Income accounts are passed through SMP_Item. (After your initial sync with QuickBooks, you will see &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMP_Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in your QuickBooks Item List. Set the income, sales, and COGS account on the SMP_Item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;·         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As SME and QuickBooks Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – inventory items are synced and are maintained in both applications. Invoicing for material in SME decreases stock in QuickBooks. Creating Purchase Orders for material in SME increase stock in QuickBooks. Manually changing stock numbers will have to be done in both SME using [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]] and also in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultExportOptions InventoryItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export for New Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Check here if you are tracking inventory items in SME &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;and&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; QuickBooks. New Inventory items added in SME will be exported to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As Inventory Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Check here if you chose to export new inventory items to QuickBooks. If not checked, the item will export to QuickBooks as a non-inventory item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The image below shows how the inventory item name and description fields sync to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryItemFields SyncToQB.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individual inventory items can be setup up with accounts other than those set as defaults in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to find the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inventory_LinkOptions.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost of Goods Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Asset Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Income Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you want this inventory item to sync to in QuickBooks with.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you checked Default Export for New Inventory, the default inventory Cost of Goods, Inventory Asset, and Sales Income accounts in SQLink are used as the defaults for any new  inventory items entered in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQlink_InventoryItems.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Classes and Accounts Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Locate the Accounts section. (circled on right)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Select the following &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;accounts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you want inventory to be the default accounts for items exporting to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
*       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Inventory Asset Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default COGS Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Sales Income Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings&amp;diff=1283</id>
		<title>Default Export to QuickBooks Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings&amp;diff=1283"/>
		<updated>2011-06-16T23:34:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, choose which forms in SME export to QuickBooks by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export on Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, new invoices in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export on Payments&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, payment entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new customers entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new vendors entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This options is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Proposals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new proposals entered in SME will export to QuickBooks as an estimate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Purchase Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;9K5J9KmqIUs&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check one of the next two options for how SME exports purchase orders to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions_POs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export for New POs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, purchase orders created in SME will export to QuickBooks as a purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;-OR-&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for New POs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, when material is received on POs in SME, SME will export a bill to QuickBooks what you owe the vendor for the part received. This is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLink_PO.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include SMP Items on Purchase Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If the inventory item on the purchase order is not in QuickBooks, then it uses the SMP Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       If you checked &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export For New Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SME, make sure you have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders Only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       If you &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;checked Default Export Bills for New Purchase Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SME, make sure you have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills Only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders &amp;amp; Bills&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – check here if you chose to default purchase orders and bills for SME purchase orders. This is uncommon.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Subcontractors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you add a service item to an order and add a subcontractor to the service, SME can either export a bill for the subcontractor in QuickBooks for the cost of the service item, or export a PO in QuickBooks for the subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubContractorOnServiceItem.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Check one of the next two options for how SME export subcontractor’s  work to QuickBooks:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions_Subcontractors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Subcontractor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like SME to generate a bill in QuickBooks for subcontractors costs, check both &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for New Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for Closed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  The bill will be for the amount in the cost field on the service item (circled in image at top of page). When the order is closed, the bill is generated in QuickBooks or when you create a new itemized invoice a bill will be generated in QuickBooks. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubcontractorBill.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-OR-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export PO for New Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – a PO is exported to QuickBooks for the subcontractor assigned to the service item on an order. This option is used by companies that have subcontractors on many service orders. Rather than generating separate bills for every order, they export purchase orders to QuickBooks. In QuickBooks, they can then add the purchase orders to one bill to pay subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLink_SubcontractorSettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.      If you are exporting Bills for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       On the Import/Export Options tab, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Closed Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click the Invoice/Proposal Options tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom of SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.      If you are exporting POs for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click the Invoice/Proposal Options tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders for Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom of SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Inventory Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory is managed in one of two ways when SME is syncing with QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;·         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As SME Only Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Items are maintained in SME and inventory Cost of Goods, Inventory Asset, and Sales Income accounts are passed through SMP_Item. (After your initial sync with QuickBooks, you will see &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMP_Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in your QuickBooks Item List. Set the income, sales, and COGS account on the SMP_Item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;·         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As SME and QuickBooks Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – inventory items are synced and are maintained in both applications. Invoicing for material in SME decreases stock in QuickBooks. Creating Purchase Orders for material in SME increase stock in QuickBooks. Manually changing stock numbers will have to be done in both SME [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]] and also in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultExportOptions InventoryItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export for New Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Check here if you are tracking inventory items in SME &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;and&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; QuickBooks. New Inventory items added in SME will be exported to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As Inventory Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Check here if you chose to export new inventory items to QuickBooks. If not checked, the item will export to QuickBooks as a non-inventory item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The image below shows how the inventory item name and description fields sync to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryItemFields SyncToQB.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individual inventory items can be setup up with accounts other than those set as defaults in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to find the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inventory_LinkOptions.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost of Goods Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Asset Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Income Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you want this inventory item to sync to in QuickBooks with.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you checked Default Export for New Inventory, the default inventory Cost of Goods, Inventory Asset, and Sales Income accounts in SQLink are used as the defaults for any new  inventory items entered in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQlink_InventoryItems.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Classes and Accounts Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Locate the Accounts section. (circled on right)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Select the following &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;accounts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you want inventory to be the default accounts for items exporting to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
*       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Inventory Asset Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default COGS Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Sales Income Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory&amp;diff=1282</id>
		<title>Inventory</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory&amp;diff=1282"/>
		<updated>2011-06-16T23:30:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In the Inventory section of the Inventory module you can setup and access all inventory items. View stock for the item, move stock between warehouses, view item purchase history, and setup ordering information for the item. You can also initiate a PO from the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Item Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
In each inventory item you can track your stock levels and see how many parts are available for orders and how many parts are reserved on orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Circled in the image below, you will see the inventory summary for an inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:StockSummary.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;On Hand&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The quantity of stock in your warehouses. On Hand increases when stock is added to your warehouses, decreases when stock is delivered to customer (reserved on an order and the order is closed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Allocated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Number of parts requested to be reserved for a service order, install orders, or itemized invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reserved&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The number of parts applied to service orders, install orders, or itemized invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unallocated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The number of parts that are available to allocate to an order (parts available to request to reserve on an order)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Available&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The number of parts in your warehouses that aren’t reserved. (on hand – reserved = available)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ON PO&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Number of items on purchase orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;RMA Out&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Number of items on return&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The cost of all stock available for the item (On the Material Details tab, Quantity * Item Cost)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retail Value&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – the retail value for all stock available for the item (On the Material Details tab, sum up Quantity * Item Retail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a New Inventory Item ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks and you have inventory items in QuickBooks, your inventory items will be imported. If you are not syncing with QuickBooks, this is how you can create inventory items in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       In the Inventory module, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Details and Settings Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;MsoTableGrid&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border-collapse: collapse; border: medium none&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 9.65in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;926&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:BlankInventoryItem.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description of Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Name of the inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 11.65pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt; height: 11.65pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt; height: 11.65pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Description of the inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Your cost to buy this item&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retail&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
The amount you sell this item for&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Condition&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select a general condition for the item.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
You can customize the drop down values to describe the status of the items&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the warehouse you are using to store this item. When adding material to orders, SME will first look in the default location.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Man. Part Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Manufacturer part number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Class&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Class. Classes are imported from QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Shelf and Bin&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter where you are storing the item in the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;HW and SW Version&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Hardware and Software Version&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
You can type the barcode number here&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;apple-style-span&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used to designate major systems of inventory or customer equipment.&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Group code&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;apple-style-span&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;black&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Used to group or categorize parts.  For example, plumbing, electrical, etc. &amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cust. Warranty Months&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the warranty period you offer your customers for this part&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor Warranty Months&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the warranty period your vendor offers you&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Labor Hours&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the estimated labor hours associated with this item. When this item is added to an order, your user will be prompted to add those labor hours in the Labor Editor window.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;MTBF&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter mean time before failure is applicable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non –Taxable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check here if this item is non-taxable&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add to Cust EQ&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If this is checked, when this item is added to an order, the item will be automatically added to the customer equipment list. Check this for all major items.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Active&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check if the item is active&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Serialized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check here if this is a serialized part&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Maintain Price Books&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;apple-style-span&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;When the cost/retail is changed in the price book (depending on settings), then all records with this flag checked will also be updated.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 2.45in; border: medium none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;235&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 7.2in; border: medium none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;691&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Check here if you don’t want to track inventory on this item. For example, with a bucket of screws you might not want to count every item in the bucket.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Image below&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The image below show how the Name and Description fields in SME Inventory Item sync to QuickBooks Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InventoryItemFields_SyncToQB.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Ordering Information Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
On the Ordering Information tab, you setup ordering information such as the vendor, minimum quantity on hand and the reorder amount.  Below is a description of all the fields on this tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderingInformationTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Minimum On Hand&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Enter the minimum quantity you want in stock in your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reorder Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Set the quantity you want to reorder if you hit your minimum threshold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity Sold YTD&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – This is a calculated field that shows you how many you have sold year to date. The field is updated when the order containing the item is invoiced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Count required to fill orders (JIT)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; –  The number of items tied to orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Manufacturer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Enter the part manufacturer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select your default vendor. When placing a PO for this item from an order, this vendor automatically populates the vendor field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lead Time (Days)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - The typical time it takes the vendor to deliver the part. Used as a reference field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Count Cycle&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select how often you want to count this inventory item (e.g. annually, quarterly, or monthly)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unit Of Measure&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Reference field for the items unit of measure (feet, lbs, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Weight (lbs)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Enter the item weight as reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Sold Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The last date the item was sold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Order Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; –The last date the item was placed on a Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Received Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The last date the item was received into inventory on a Purchase Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Reconciliation Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The last date the item quantities were reconciled using the Inventory Reconciliation utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Vendors Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
On the Vendor tab, enter additional vendors that supply this part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ItemVendor.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;MsoTableGrid&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border-collapse: collapse; border: medium none&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: 1pt medium; border-style: solid none; border-color: black -moz-use-text-color; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: 1pt medium; border-style: solid none; border-color: black -moz-use-text-color; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the vendor from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor Zone&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Shows the zone assigned to the vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item name, Number and Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Populated from the inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Manufacturer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the manufacturer of the item&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lead Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the vendors lead time&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System type &amp;amp; Man. Part Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Populated from the inventory items Defaults and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor Part Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your vendor’s part number&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 74.25pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;99&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Cost, PO Item Cost and Retail Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 262.35pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;350&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Populated from the inventory item Defaults and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Stock Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
On the Stock tab, you will see a summary of stock for each warehouse location. You can see the stock quantity, the amount reserved, and the amount of stock available at each location. Although the inventory count information is shown on the main page of the inventory item, it is not directly editable as an item. Instead stock levels are controlled through adding of stock (typically only initially), purchase orders (PO&amp;#039;s), and inventory reconciliation adjustments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:STockTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Add Stock Item&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once you get started using SME, you will add stock to inventory through purchase orders. When getting started setting up your stock in SME, you may need to manually enter stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddStockItem.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;*NOTE*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If you are tracking inventory quantities in QuickBooks, any stock manually entered in SME using “Add Stock Items” will also need to be entered into QuickBooks.  Only invoices from SME automatically deplete inventory in QuickBooks. Only POs or Bills from SME automatically increase inventory in QuickBooks. Therefore, it is recommended for most stock transactions to go through purchase orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adding Non-Serialized Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the inventory item you need to add stock for.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the Stock tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click Add Stock Items.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the top portion of the Inventory Stock Editor window, you can change the warehouse you are adding stock to.&lt;br /&gt;
#        Update the quantity in the Add Qty field.&lt;br /&gt;
#      Enter additional information such as condition, shelf and bin number.&lt;br /&gt;
#      Click OK and the stock is added to inventory. Notice the summary quantities at the top of the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:addingserialized.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;View Stock Details in Warehouses&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see stock details by warehouse location and change serial numbers, you can use the Inventory Stock Editor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the warehouse location you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       The material details for that stock warehouse location will open in the Inventory Stock Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
#       You can right click on a material detail item to edit the serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ViewStockDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Material Details Tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Material Details tab provides details on all the material for this inventory item. For serialized items, the Material Details tab shows each stock item on a separate line. Notice the Quantity, Reserved, Available and Serial # columns. For non-serialized items each line is a stock lot, meaning something is different in each lot such as vendor or pricing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MaterialDetails2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Move stock to another warhouse&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This allows the movement of individual stock items. If items are moved to a warehouse, that warehouse will be created in Stock tab if it does not already show. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the stock you need to move.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       In the Move Stock window, select the warehouse you are moving the item to in the Destination field. Enter Shelf and Bin if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are moving non-serialized stock, you may be moving part of a stock lot. Enter the quantity from the lot you want to move in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStock.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Notice the location change on the Material Details tab and the Stock tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;View stock item transactions&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To view the history of transactions for material:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Select the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Right click on item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View Item Transactions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       The transaction history will open in another window. (image on right)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ItemTransactions.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Export material details to Excel&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Select the Material Details tab.&lt;br /&gt;
2.       Right click in the grid and select Export to Excel (image on right).&lt;br /&gt;
3.       Select where you want to save the file and click Save&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:excelmaterialDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Kit Items&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When you add material to an order, you may need to know what parts go with that material. You can add this related material on the Kit Items tab. When you are adding the material to an order, you can reference the kit items so you know what other material you may need to add to the order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add kit items to an inventory item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Go to an inventory item in the Inventory module.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Kit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Kit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Item.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Referencing kit items in an order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Create a new order.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Materials&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Select the inventory item you created the kit for.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the window that opens, select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Kit Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and you will see the material in the associated kit. &lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReferenceKitItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Purchase History&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The purchase history tab provides information about all purchase orders placed for the inventory item. Double click on a line in the grid, and SME will jump to the purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Syncing Inventory with QuickBooks&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To read about syncing inventory between SME and QuickBooks, go to the [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Searching Inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Search window to look up inventory items and export your inventory item list to Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.    Select Inventory module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.    Click Search and select Search Active Items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchActiveInventoyrItems.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.    Double click on the item in the list to go to the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Choose columns in Search Active Items&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can sort your items by every column you view in the Search Active Items window. You can also select which columns you are viewing in this window.  You might want to have the ability to sort your items by Item Number, System Type, minimum on hand, or Available.  To choose columns:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In the Search Active Items window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Views, Add Remove Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Grid Columns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window that displays, check the item fields you want to view as columns. Uncheck the ones you don’t want to view. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GridColumns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Notice the columns you selected added.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click on any column header to sort the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. When you close the Search Active Items window, you will be prompted to save your new view. If you want to, click OK and type a name for the view. The view will be saved for you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; When you save a new view, all SME users will have access to the view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Select Saved View&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In the Inventory module, click Search, Search Active Items.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the Search Active Items window, click Views, Apply View and select the custom view. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ApplyView.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.The grid will change to the custom view you created. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Search For Field&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field allows you to type the name of the record you want to find instead of scrolling through your list. This can save you time if your list is long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Click the column header you want to search by.(1)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Type the name you are searching for in the Search For field. (2) As you type, the row will be highlighted.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Either double click on the record to open customer, or when the customer is highlighted hit enter on your keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SearchForO_Inventory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Grouping by Columns&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the search window, you can group the data by a column. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Drag and drop column header into the gray header area above the columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DragToGroup.png]][[File:Grouped.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Notice the data grouped by the data in the column selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the plus sign in each group to expand the group.  (image on right)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Remove grouping by dragging the column header back in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Export Search View to Excel&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In Search window, click Export and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to Excel&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ExportInventorySearch.png]]  [[File:InventorySearch_Excel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the window that opens, Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and Excel will launch with your inventory data.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Use Excel tools to manipulate the data&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Filtering Search&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply filters to your search view to see only the data you want to see. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Make sure the data you want to filter by is added as a column in your view.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click the Filter icon [[File:FilterIcon.jpg]] at the bottom of the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the Filter Builder window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;press the button to add a new condition&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UID&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select the field that contains the value you want to filter by. (1)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;like&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to select the filter type.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;empty&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and type the value you want to filter the search by. (2)&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and your search view is filtered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can apply more than one filter to your search view by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;press the button to add a new condition and setting the condition.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Filtering.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Look up by Item Number&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Navigate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Go To&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Navigate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Find Item Number&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window, type the item number you want to open and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage Grid Columns on Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
Throughout the many tabs in SME, you will find grids. You can rearrange the order of the columns in the grid, remove columns from the grid and add them back to the grid. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Rearrange column order and width&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can move and change the width of the columns. To change the width, click your cursor in the column header between two columns and you will see the cross arrow. Drag your cursor to the desired column width. To change the order, click the column header and drag the column header to the desired column header location in the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Remove columns&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a column, drag and drop the column above the grid as shown in the image below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Grids.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Add columns that were previously removed&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Right click on any material.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Select Add Columns to Grid.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the Customization Window you will see all columns that were previously removed.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Drag and drop the column you want to add back to the grid as shown in the screenshot below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddColumnToGrid.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings&amp;diff=1281</id>
		<title>Default Export to QuickBooks Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings&amp;diff=1281"/>
		<updated>2011-06-16T23:27:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, choose which forms in SME export to QuickBooks by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export on Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, new invoices in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export on Payments&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, payment entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new customers entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This option is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new vendors entered in SME will export to QuickBooks. This options is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export New Proposals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If checked, new proposals entered in SME will export to QuickBooks as an estimate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Purchase Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;9K5J9KmqIUs&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check one of the next two options for how SME exports purchase orders to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions_POs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export for New POs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, purchase orders created in SME will export to QuickBooks as a purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;-OR-&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for New POs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If checked, when material is received on POs in SME, SME will export a bill to QuickBooks what you owe the vendor for the part received. This is usually checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLink_PO.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Include SMP Items on Purchase Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If the inventory item on the purchase order is not in QuickBooks, then it uses the SMP Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       If you checked &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export For New Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SME, make sure you have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders Only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       If you &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;checked Default Export Bills for New Purchase Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SME, make sure you have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills Only&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders &amp;amp; Bills&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – check here if you chose to default purchase orders and bills for SME purchase orders. This is uncommon.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Subcontractors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you add a service item to an order and add a subcontractor to the service, SME can either export a bill for the subcontractor in QuickBooks for the cost of the service item, or export a PO in QuickBooks for the subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubContractorOnServiceItem.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Check one of the next two options for how SME export subcontractor’s  work to QuickBooks:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions_Subcontractors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Subcontractor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like SME to generate a bill in QuickBooks for subcontractors costs, check both &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for New Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export Bills for Closed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  The bill will be for the amount in the cost field on the service item (circled in image at top of page). When the order is closed, the bill is generated in QuickBooks or when you create a new itemized invoice a bill will be generated in QuickBooks. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubcontractorBill.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-OR-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export PO for New Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – a PO is exported to QuickBooks for the subcontractor assigned to the service item on an order. This option is used by companies that have subcontractors on many service orders. Rather than generating separate bills for every order, they export purchase orders to QuickBooks. In QuickBooks, they can then add the purchase orders to one bill to pay subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQLink_SubcontractorSettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.      If you are exporting Bills for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       On the Import/Export Options tab, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Closed Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click the Invoice/Proposal Options tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Bills for Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom of SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.      If you are exporting POs for Subcontractors:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click the Invoice/Proposal Options tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export Purchase Orders for Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;         *       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom of SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export Options for Inventory Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
Inventory is managed in one of two ways when SME is syncing with QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;·         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As SME Only Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Items are maintained in SME and inventory Cost of Goods, Inventory Asset, and Sales Income accounts are passed through SMP_Item. (After your initial sync with QuickBooks, you will see &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SMP_Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in your QuickBooks Item List. Set the income, sales, and COGS account on the SMP_Item)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;·         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As SME and QuickBooks Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – inventory items are synced and are maintained in both applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DefaultExportOptions InventoryItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Export for New Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Check here if you are tracking inventory items in SME &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;and&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; QuickBooks. New Inventory items added in SME will be exported to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;As Inventory Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Check here if you chose to export new inventory items to QuickBooks. If not checked, the item will export to QuickBooks as a non-inventory item. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The image below shows how the inventory item name and description fields sync to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryItemFields SyncToQB.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Individual inventory items can be setup up with accounts other than those set as defaults in SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to find the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Inventory_LinkOptions.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost of Goods Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Asset Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Income Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you want this inventory item to sync to in QuickBooks with.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Related SQLink Setup&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you checked Default Export for New Inventory, the default inventory Cost of Goods, Inventory Asset, and Sales Income accounts in SQLink are used as the defaults for any new  inventory items entered in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SQlink_InventoryItems.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open SQLink.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Classes and Accounts Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Locate the Accounts section. (circled on right)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Select the following &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;accounts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you want inventory to be the default accounts for items exporting to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
*       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Inventory Asset Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default COGS Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default Sales Income Account&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=TechPortal_for_SME&amp;diff=1247</id>
		<title>TechPortal for SME</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=TechPortal_for_SME&amp;diff=1247"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T17:07:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;TechPortal for SME is a web-based application providing your technicians with the ability to access and update their work orders in the field. Technicians can access open orders assigned to them, create new orders, and access unassigned work orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn about the TechPortal, you can either read this guide or view the video below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;SPtgr6dP0F8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assign User Name and Password for Techs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a tech to sign in to TechPortal, they will need their email address&lt;br /&gt;
#       Open SME and log in.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technician you want to provide TechPortal access to.&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Details and Settings tab, enter your technician’s email address in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. This is the technicians SME TechPortal Username.&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Technician Settings tab, enter a TechPortal password for your tech in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Web Access Password&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebAccessPass.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(255, 102, 0);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log In&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide your technician with your TechPortal link, email address and password assigned. The email address is their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Web Access Password is their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Password&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Orders Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrdersPage.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;line-height: 115%; font-size: 22pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click Time to clock in and clock out. The tech’s clock in and out time logged in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click to go back to the list of orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calendar&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The calendar will display all of the jobs scheduled for the technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log Out&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click to log out of TechPortal.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;line-height: 115%; font-size: 22pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2 &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – This tab shows all open orders assigned to the technician logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unassigned Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This tab lists all open orders that haven’t been assigned to a technician yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewing Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, you can sort your orders, search for keywords and choose how many orders show on each page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 18pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Show – choose how many orders to display per page&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 0in 0in 0pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 20pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;– Search – enter a key word and your orders will be filtered&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 0in 0in 0pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 20pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Select the page you want to view.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column headers to sort the orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on an order to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can select an open order to view and edit. Any changes made in the order in the TechPortal automatically update SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectOrder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Services Requested and Performed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the services requested, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Requested&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the text will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServiceRequested.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add to services requested, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Enter the text in the window that opens and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The text added will automatically be saved in SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View and add service performed the same way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServicesPerformed.jpg]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services Performed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to view text.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add services performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddServicesPerformed.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Time ==&lt;br /&gt;
To add labor time to an order, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddTime.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       The Time window opens and lists all labor time on the order. To add more time, click&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TimeWindow_Add.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       In the Add Time window, select the Service item, enter the date, and enter the Start Time, Scheduled Hours and Billable Hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddTimeDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Time window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Parts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can add parts (material) to open orders.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditParts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       In the Add Parts window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the material from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddPartsWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The material added in TechPortal is added to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Remove parts from an order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the Parts window, check the material you want to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteParts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.       In the Delete Material confirmation window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Services ==&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can add service items to orders. Service items added in TechPortal immediately update SME at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditServices.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       In the Services window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Enter the quantity and select the service item in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:servicesWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Services window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Buttons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderButtons.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Forms&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Click Forms to view and edit custom fields in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site Notes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Site Notes to view notes entered in SME. Site Notes are read only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Signature&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Click Signature to collect your customer signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Email to email the order summary to your customer or back to the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Close and the order will change from Open to Closed. Once an order is closed, you cannot access it through TechPortal anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Collecting Signature&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:signatureButton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Signature and the signature window will open. If you are viewing TechPortal on a laptop, use your mouse to write your signature. If you are using a touch screen device, use your finger to write your signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DrawSignature.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Clear&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to clear out the signature and sign again.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the signature is saved in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View Signature in SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the signature in SME, go to the Work Requested tab and click Signature. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:signatureOnWorkRequested.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create a report that shows signature&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to print or email a service order report that shows the signature captured in TechPortal, you can follow these instructions to create the report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServiceOrderWithSign.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customize Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Standard Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Search for &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Order Ticket&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Duplicate Report&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter a new name in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Short Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Title&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Designer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#        Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Files&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save As&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the Save As window, enter a new file name in the File name field. At the end of the name, type .rtm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenameFileName.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.  Close the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Builder&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.    Click [[File:BrowseForFile.jpg]] next to the Filename field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BrowseForSavedFile.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.     In the Open window that opens, select the file you saved in step 8 above. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectSavedFile.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Designer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.       In Report Builder, click the DBImage icon ( [[File:DBImageIcon.jpg]])at the top (circled in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DBImageIconInToolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;16.       Click your cursor in the report where you want the signature image to be. Expand the box&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;17.       Select the DBImage (as shown in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DBImage_selected.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;18.   Select PngSignature in the field circled in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PngSignature.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;19.   Locate the Data section on the left. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GraphicType.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;20.   In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GraphicType&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drop down, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;JPG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;21.   Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ParentDataPipeline&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;22.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;23.   Close the Report Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can go to a service order, click Print/Email and print out the customized report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add New Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TechPortal provides technicians in the field with the ability to add new orders. New orders added here will be saved immediately to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to go to the order list in TechPortal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddOrderbutton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Fill out the order information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderSummary.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*a.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; use the drop down list to select the customer name.&lt;br /&gt;
*b.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select if the order is an install order or service order.&lt;br /&gt;
*c.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ref Number:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter a reference number. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*d.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select a date and time the order is due. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*e.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Status:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select an order status. This drop down list is customized by your SME Administrator in the SME Setup module.&lt;br /&gt;
*f.        &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the service code, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
*g.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SLA:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; type the service level agreement, if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
*h.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select the contact for the order. The drop down will list all contacts for the company.&lt;br /&gt;
*i.         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Summary:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the order summary. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the order is added to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Continue adding order details as needed by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Services Requested, Services Performed, Time, Parts, and Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unassigned Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Unassigned Orders tab show all open orders that haven’t been assigned to a technician yet. A tech can select an unassigned order and assign it to them. Once they assign it to themselves, the order will be listed on their Orders tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UnassignedTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unassigned Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click on an order.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the lower left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Assign.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Assign Technician window, select your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the order is assigned to you and will display on the Orders tab in TechPortal. Edit the order as you would any other order.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=TechPortal_for_SME&amp;diff=1246</id>
		<title>TechPortal for SME</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=TechPortal_for_SME&amp;diff=1246"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T17:07:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;TechPortal for SME is a web-based application providing your technicians with the ability to access and update their work orders in the field. Technicians can access open orders assigned to them, create new orders, and access unassigned work orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn about the TechPortal, you can either read this guide or view the video below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;SPtgr6dP0F8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assign User Name and Password for Techs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a tech to sign in to TechPortal, they will need their email address&lt;br /&gt;
#       Open SME and log in.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technician you want to provide TechPortal access to.&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Details and Settings tab, enter your technician’s email address in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. This is the technicians SME TechPortal Username.&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Technician Settings tab, enter a TechPortal password for your tech in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Web Access Password&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebAccessPass.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(255, 102, 0);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log In&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide your technician with your TechPortal link, email address and password assigned. The email address is their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Web Access Password is their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Password&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Orders Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrdersPage.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;line-height: 115%; font-size: 22pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click Time to clock in and clock out. The tech’s clock in and out time logged in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click to go back to the list of orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calendar&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The calendar will display all of the jobs scheduled for the technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log Out&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click to log out of TechPortal.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;line-height: 115%; font-size: 22pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2 &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – This tab shows all open orders assigned to the technician logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unassigned Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This tab lists all open orders that haven’t been assigned to a technician yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewing Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, you can sort your orders, search for keywords and choose how many orders show on each page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 18pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Show – choose how many orders to display per page&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 0in 0in 0pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 20pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;– Search – enter a key word and your orders will be filtered&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 0in 0in 0pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 20pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Select the page you want to view.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column headers to sort the orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on an order to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can select an open order to view and edit. Any changes made in the order in the TechPortal automatically update SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectOrder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Services Requested and Performed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the services requested, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Requested&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the text will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServiceRequested.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add to services requested, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Enter the text in the window that opens and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The text added will automatically be saved in SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View and add service performed the same way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServicesPerformed.jpg]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services Performed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to view text.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add services performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddServicesPerformed.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Time ==&lt;br /&gt;
To add labor time to an order, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddTime.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       The Time window opens and lists all labor time on the order. To add more time, click&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TimeWindow_Add.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       In the Add Time window, select the Service item, enter the date, and enter the Start Time, Scheduled Hours and Billable Hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddTimeDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Time window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Parts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can add parts (material) to open orders.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditParts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       In the Add Parts window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the material from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddPartsWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The material added in TechPortal is added to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Remove parts from an order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the Parts window, check the material you want to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteParts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.       In the Delete Material confirmation window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Services ==&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can add service items to orders. Service items added in TechPortal immediately update SME at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditServices.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       In the Services window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Enter the quantity and select the service item in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:servicesWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Services window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Buttons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderButtons.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Forms&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Click Forms to view and edit custom fields in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site Notes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Site Notes to view notes entered in SME. Site Notes are read only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Signature&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Click Signature to collect your customer signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Email to email the order summary to your customer or back to the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Close and the order will change from Open to Closed. Once an order is closed, you cannot access it through TechPortal anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Collecting Signature&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:signatureButton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Signature and the signature window will open. If you are viewing TechPortal on a laptop, use your mouse to write your signature. If you are using a touch screen device, use your finger to write your signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DrawSignature.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Clear&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to clear out the signature and sign again.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the signature is saved in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View Signature in SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the signature in SME, go to the Work Requested tab and click Signature. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:signatureOnWorkRequested.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create a report that shows signature&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to print or email a service order report that shows the signature captured in TechPortal, you can follow these instructions to create the report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServiceOrderWithSign.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customize Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Standard Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Search for &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Order Ticket&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Duplicate Report&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter a new name in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Short Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Title&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Designer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#        Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Files&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save As&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the Save As window, enter a new file name in the File name field. At the end of the name, type .rtm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenameFileName.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.  Close the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Builder&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.    Click [[File:BrowseForFile.jpg]] next to the Filename field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BrowseForSavedFile.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.     In the Open window that opens, select the file you saved in step 8 above. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectSavedFile.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Designer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.       In Report Builder, click the DBImage icon ( [[File:DBImageIcon.jpg]])at the top (circled in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DBImageIconInToolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;16.       Click your cursor in the report where you want the signature image to be. Expand the box&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;17.       Select the DBImage (as shown in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DBImage_selected.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;18.   Select PngSignature in the field circled in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PngSignature.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;19.   Locate the Data section on the left. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GraphicType.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;20.   In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GraphicType&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drop down, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;JPG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;21.   Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ParentDataPipeline&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;22.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;23.   Close the Report Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can go to a service order, click Print/Email and print out the customized report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add New Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TechPortal provides technicians in the field with the ability to add new orders. New orders added here will be saved immediately to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to go to the order list in TechPortal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddOrderbutton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Fill out the order information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderSummary.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*a.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; use the drop down list to select the customer name.&lt;br /&gt;
*b.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select if the order is an install order or service order.&lt;br /&gt;
*c.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ref Number:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter a reference number. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*d.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select a date and time the order is due. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*e.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Status:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select an order status. This drop down list is customized by your SME Administrator in the SME Setup module.&lt;br /&gt;
*f.        &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the service code, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
*g.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SLA:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; type the service level agreement, if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
*h.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select the contact for the order. The drop down will list all contacts for the company.&lt;br /&gt;
*i.         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Summary:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the order summary. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the order is added to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Continue adding order details as needed by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Services Requested, Services Performed, Time, Parts, and Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unassigned Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Unassigned Orders tab show all open orders that haven’t been assigned to a technician yet. A tech can select an unassigned order and assign it to them. Once they assign it to themselves, the order will be listed on their Orders tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UnassignedTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unassigned Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click on an order.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the lower left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Assign.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Assign Technician window, select your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the order is assigned to you and will display on the Orders tab in TechPortal. Edit the order as you would any other order.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=TechPortal_for_SME&amp;diff=1245</id>
		<title>TechPortal for SME</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=TechPortal_for_SME&amp;diff=1245"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T17:06:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;TechPortal for SME is a web-based application providing your technicians with the ability to access and update their work orders in the field. Technicians can access open orders assigned to them, create new orders, and access unassigned work orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn about the TechPortal, you can either read this guide or view the video below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;SPtgr6dP0F8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assign User Name and Password for Techs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a tech to sign in to TechPortal, they will need their email address&lt;br /&gt;
#       Open SME and log in.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technician you want to provide TechPortal access to.&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Details and Settings tab, enter your technician’s email address in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. This is the technicians SME TechPortal Username.&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Technician Settings tab, enter a TechPortal password for your tech in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Web Access Password&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebAccessPass.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(255, 102, 0);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log In&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide your technician with your TechPortal link, email address and password assigned. The email address is their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Web Access Password is their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Password&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Orders Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrdersPage.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;line-height: 115%; font-size: 22pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click Time to clock in and clock out. The tech’s clock in and out time logged in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click to go back to the list of orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calendar&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The calendar will display all of the jobs scheduled for the technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log Out&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click to log out of TechPortal.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;line-height: 115%; font-size: 22pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2 &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – This tab shows all open orders assigned to the technician logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unassigned Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This tab lists all open orders that haven’t been assigned to a technician yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewing Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, you can sort your orders, search for keywords and choose how many orders show on each page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 18pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Show – choose how many orders to display per page&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 0in 0in 0pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 20pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;– Search – enter a key word and your orders will be filtered&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 0in 0in 0pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 20pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Select the page you want to view.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column headers to sort the orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on an order to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can select an open order to view and edit. Any changes made in the order in the TechPortal automatically update SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectOrder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Services Requested and Performed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the services requested, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Requested&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the text will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServiceRequested.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add to services requested, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Enter the text in the window that opens and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The text added will automatically be saved in SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View and add service performed the same way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServicesPerformed.jpg]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services Performed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to view text.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add services performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddServicesPerformed.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Time ==&lt;br /&gt;
To add labor time to an order, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddTime.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       The Time window opens and lists all labor time on the order. To add more time, click&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TimeWindow_Add.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       In the Add Time window, select the Service item, enter the date, and enter the Start Time, Scheduled Hours and Billable Hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddTimeDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Time window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Parts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can add parts (material) to open orders.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditParts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       In the Add Parts window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the material from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddPartsWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The material added in TechPortal is added to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Remove parts from an order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the Parts window, check the material you want to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteParts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.       In the Delete Material confirmation window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Services ==&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can add service items to orders. Service items added in TechPortal immediately update SME at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditServices.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       In the Services window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Enter the quantity and select the service item in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:servicesWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Services window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Buttons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderButtons.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Forms&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Click Forms to view and edit custom fields in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site Notes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Site Notes to view notes entered in SME. Site Notes are read only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Signature&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Click Signature to collect your customer signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Email to email the order summary to your customer or back to the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Close and the order will change from Open to Closed. Once an order is closed, you cannot access it through TechPortal anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Collecting Signature&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:signatureButton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Signature and the signature window will open. If you are viewing TechPortal on a laptop, use your mouse to write your signature. If you are using a touch screen device, use your finger to write your signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DrawSignature.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Clear&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to clear out the signature and sign again.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the signature is saved in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View Signature in SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the signature in SME, go to the Work Requested tab and click Signature. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:signatureOnWorkRequested.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create a report that shows signature&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to print or email a service order report that shows the signature captured in TechPortal, you can follow these instructions to create the report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServiceOrderWithSign.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customize Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Standard Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Search for &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Order Ticket&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Duplicate Report&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter a new name in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Short Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Title&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Designer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#        Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Files&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save As&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the Save As window, enter a new file name in the File name field. At the end of the name, type .rtm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenameFileName.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.  Close the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Builder&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.    Click [[File:BrowseForFile.jpg]] next to the Filename field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BrowseForSavedFile.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.     In the Open window that opens, select the file you saved in step 8 above. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectSavedFile.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Designer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.       In Report Builder, click the DBImage icon ( [[File:DBImageIcon.jpg]])at the top (circled in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DBImageIconInToolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;16.       Click your cursor in the report where you want the signature image to be. Expand the box&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;17.       Select the DBImage (as shown in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DBImage_selected.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;18.   Select PngSignature in the field circled in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PngSignature.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;19.   Locate the Data section on the left. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GraphicType.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;20.   In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GraphicType&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drop down, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;JPG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;21.   Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ParentDataPipeline&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;22.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;23.   Close the Report Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can go to a service order, click Print/Email and print out the customized report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add New Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TechPortal provides technicians in the field with the ability to add new orders. New orders added here will be saved immediately to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to go to the order list in TechPortal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddOrderbutton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Fill out the order information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderSummary.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*a.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; use the drop down list to select the customer name.&lt;br /&gt;
*b.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select if the order is an install order or service order.&lt;br /&gt;
*c.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ref Number:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter a reference number. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*d.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select a date and time the order is due. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*e.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Status:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select an order status. This drop down list is customized by your SME Administrator in the SME Setup module.&lt;br /&gt;
*f.        &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the service code, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
*g.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SLA:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; type the service level agreement, if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
*h.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select the contact for the order. The drop down will list all contacts for the company.&lt;br /&gt;
*i.         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Summary:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the order summary. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the order is added to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Continue adding order details as needed by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Services Requested, Services Performed, Time, Parts, and Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unassigned Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Unassigned Orders tab show all open orders that haven’t been assigned to a technician yet. A tech can select an unassigned order and assign it to them. Once they assign it to themselves, the order will be listed on their Orders tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UnassignedTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unassigned Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click on an order.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the lower left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Assign.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Assign Technician window, select your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the order is assigned to you and will display on the Orders tab in TechPortal. Edit the order as you would any other order.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=TechPortal_for_SME&amp;diff=1244</id>
		<title>TechPortal for SME</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=TechPortal_for_SME&amp;diff=1244"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T17:04:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: Created page with &amp;quot;TechPortal for SME is a web-based application providing your technicians with the ability to access and update their work orders in the field. Technicians can access open orders ...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;TechPortal for SME is a web-based application providing your technicians with the ability to access and update their work orders in the field. Technicians can access open orders assigned to them, create new orders, and access unassigned work orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn about the TechPortal, you can either read this guide or view the video below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;SPtgr6dP0F8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assign User Name and Password for Techs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a tech to sign in to TechPortal, they will need their email address&lt;br /&gt;
#       Open SME and log in.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technician you want to provide TechPortal access to.&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Details and Settings tab, enter your technician’s email address in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. This is the technicians SME Tech Portal Username.&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Technician Settings tab, enter a TechPortal password for your tech in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Web Access Password&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebAccessPass.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(255, 102, 0);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log In&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide your technician with your SME Tech Portal link, email address and password assigned. The email address is their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Web Access Password is their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Password&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Orders Page ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrdersPage.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;line-height: 115%; font-size: 22pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click Time to clock in and clock out. The tech’s clock in and out time logged in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;User&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click to go back to the list of orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calendar&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – The calendar will display all of the jobs scheduled for the technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Log Out&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click to log out of SME Tech Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;line-height: 115%; font-size: 22pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2 &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – This tab shows all open orders assigned to the technician logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unassigned Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This tab lists all open orders that haven’t been assigned to a technician yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Viewing Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, you can sort your orders, search for keywords and choose how many orders show on each page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 18pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Show – choose how many orders to display per page&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 0in 0in 0pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 20pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;– Search – enter a key word and your orders will be filtered&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin: 0in 0in 0pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-size: 20pt;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; – Select the page you want to view.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column headers to sort the orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on an order to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can select an open order to view and edit. Any changes made in the order in the SME Tech Portal automatically update SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectOrder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Services Requested and Performed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the services requested, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Requested&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the text will display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServiceRequested.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add to services requested, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Enter the text in the window that opens and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The text added will automatically be saved in SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View and add service performed the same way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServicesPerformed.jpg]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services Performed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to view text.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add services performed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddServicesPerformed.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Time ==&lt;br /&gt;
To add labor time to an order, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddTime.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       The Time window opens and lists all labor time on the order. To add more time, click&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TimeWindow_Add.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       In the Add Time window, select the Service item, enter the date, and enter the Start Time, Scheduled Hours and Billable Hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddTimeDetails.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Time window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Parts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can add parts (material) to open orders.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditParts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       In the Add Parts window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the material from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddPartsWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The material added in SME Tech Portal is added to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Remove parts from an order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Parts.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the Parts window, check the material you want to remove.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DeleteParts.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.       In the Delete Material confirmation window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Parts window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add Services ==&lt;br /&gt;
Technicians can add service items to orders. Service items added in SME Tech Portal immediately update SME at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditServices.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       In the Services window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Enter the quantity and select the service item in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:servicesWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Services window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Buttons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderButtons.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Forms&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Click Forms to view and edit custom fields in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Site Notes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Site Notes to view notes entered in SME. Site Notes are read only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Signature&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Click Signature to collect your customer signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Email to email the order summary to your customer or back to the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Click Close and the order will change from Open to Closed. Once an order is closed, you cannot access it through SME Tech Portal anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Collecting Signature&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:signatureButton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Signature and the signature window will open. If you are viewing SME Tech Portal on a laptop, use your mouse to write your signature. If you are using a touch screen device, use your finger to write your signature.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DrawSignature.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Clear&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to clear out the signature and sign again.&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the signature is saved in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;View Signature in SME&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the signature in SME, go to the Work Requested tab and click Signature. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:signatureOnWorkRequested.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create a report that shows signature&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to print or email a service order report that shows the signature captured in SME Tech Portal, you can follow these instructions to create the report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServiceOrderWithSign.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customize Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Standard Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Search for &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Order Ticket&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Duplicate Report&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Enter a new name in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Short Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Title&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Designer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#        Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Files&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save As&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the Save As window, enter a new file name in the File name field. At the end of the name, type .rtm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RenameFileName.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.  Close the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Builder&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.    Click [[File:BrowseForFile.jpg]] next to the Filename field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BrowseForSavedFile.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.     In the Open window that opens, select the file you saved in step 8 above. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectSavedFile.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Report Designer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15.       In Report Builder, click the DBImage icon ( [[File:DBImageIcon.jpg]])at the top (circled in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DBImageIconInToolbar.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;16.       Click your cursor in the report where you want the signature image to be. Expand the box&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;17.       Select the DBImage (as shown in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DBImage_selected.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;18.   Select PngSignature in the field circled in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PngSignature.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;19.   Locate the Data section on the left. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:GraphicType.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;20.   In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;GraphicType&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drop down, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;JPG&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;21.   Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;ParentDataPipeline&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;22.   Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;23.   Close the Report Designer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can go to a service order, click Print/Email and print out the customized report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add New Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SME Tech Portal provides technicians in the field with the ability to add new orders. New orders added here will be saved immediately to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to go to the order list in SME Tech Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddOrderbutton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Fill out the order information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderSummary.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*a.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; use the drop down list to select the customer name.&lt;br /&gt;
*b.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Type:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select if the order is an install order or service order.&lt;br /&gt;
*c.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ref Number:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter a reference number. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*d.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due Date:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select a date and time the order is due. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*e.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Status:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select an order status. This drop down list is customized by your SME Administrator in the SME Setup module.&lt;br /&gt;
*f.        &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Code:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the service code, if applicable&lt;br /&gt;
*g.       &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SLA:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; type the service level agreement, if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
*h.      &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; select the contact for the order. The drop down will list all contacts for the company.&lt;br /&gt;
*i.         &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Summary:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; enter the order summary. Not a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the order is added to SME back at the office.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Continue adding order details as needed by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to Services Requested, Services Performed, Time, Parts, and Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unassigned Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Unassigned Orders tab show all open orders that haven’t been assigned to a technician yet. A tech can select an unassigned order and assign it to them. Once they assign it to themselves, the order will be listed on their Orders tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UnassignedTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unassigned Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click on an order.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assign&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the lower left corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Assign.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Assign Technician window, select your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the order is assigned to you and will display on the Orders tab in SME Tech Portal. Edit the order as you would any other order.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1243</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1243"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T16:56:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Click the [[Wiki Books]] link for a more organized grouping of information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service &amp;amp; Install Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Service &amp;amp; Install Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projects]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Material Allocation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Packages]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Vendors]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Returns]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Transfers]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Invoicing]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payments]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch and  Scheduling&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dispatch Guide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME Add-on Products&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[TechPortal for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 Wiki &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Welcome to High5 Wiki]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1242</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1242"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T16:54:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Click the [[Wiki Books]] link for a more organized grouping of information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service &amp;amp; Install Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Service &amp;amp; Install Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projects]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Material Allocation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Packages]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Vendors]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Returns]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Transfers]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Invoicing]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payments]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch and  Scheduling&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dispatch Guide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 Wiki &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Welcome to High5 Wiki]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Welcome_to_High5_Wiki&amp;diff=1241</id>
		<title>Welcome to High5 Wiki</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Welcome_to_High5_Wiki&amp;diff=1241"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T16:53:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Welcome to High 5 Wiki!&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Our goal is to provide a community driven resource that remains clear, concise, constructive, and above all is valuable to everyone. If you would like full access please follow the Register link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is a website we can build together. We invite you to share your ideas and ask questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki will provide all documentation and information that is required for a seamless SME experience. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 Software provides service management software solutions for field service companies in a variety of industries. Focusing on companies that need to manage work orders, technicians, inventory, and customer equipment tracking. Industries such as telecom/interconnect installers, security, Information Technology (IT), Fire &amp;amp; Safety, Fitness repair, HVAC, Electrical contractors, and many more rely on SME for daily business operations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Introduction]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Support Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Administration and Setup]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Lookup Lists]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Backups]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[System Requirements]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Groups]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[What&amp;#039;s New 6.3 - Final Build]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[What&amp;#039;s New: What&amp;#039;s Coming]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Roles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Receptionist Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Dispatcher Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customer Service Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Administration and Setup Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Accounting and Bookkeeping Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customer Service Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Controller or Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Field Technician Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Project Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Order Entry Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Marketing Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Purchasing Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Manager or Owner using SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Technical Support Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Subcontractor Coordinator or Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Roles: Sales Person]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Feature Details]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Activities]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Warehouses]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Notes]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Email Marketing Campaign]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Views]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Progress Invoicing]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Search]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Installing MS SQL Server 2008]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Finance charges/LateFees]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[How To Articles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Best Practices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Best Practices: FirePro]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Navigation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Record Navagation: Views]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[User Interface (GUI)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Interface: Modules and Sub Modules]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Interface: Buttons]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Dispatch]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utilities]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Reporting]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Company Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Module Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customizing Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Outlook and Exchange Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Outlook and Exchange Sync: Outlook Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Outlook and Exchange Sync: Exchange Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SQLink - For QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[WebConnect]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Field Service Overview]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[ Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Preparation for Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Install SQL for Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Installing Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Configuring Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Affiliates and Third Party Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Contacts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME: Service Management Enterprise]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME6.2 New Features]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME 7.0]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME Import Export Process]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[ SME Basics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SMP Install (Old)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Best Practices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[About This Manual]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1240</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1240"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T16:52:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Click the [[Wiki Books]] link for a more organized grouping of information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service &amp;amp; Install Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Service &amp;amp; Install Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projects]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Material Allocation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Packages]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Vendors]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Returns]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Transfers]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Invoicing]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payments]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch and  Scheduling&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dispatch Guide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 Wiki &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Welcome to High5 Wiki]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Introduction]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Support Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Administration and Setup]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Lookup Lists]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Backups]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[System Requirements]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Groups]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[What&amp;#039;s New 6.3 - Final Build]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[What&amp;#039;s New: What&amp;#039;s Coming]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Roles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Receptionist Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Dispatcher Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customer Service Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Administration and Setup Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Accounting and Bookkeeping Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customer Service Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Controller or Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Field Technician Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Project Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Order Entry Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Marketing Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Purchasing Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Manager or Owner using SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Technical Support Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Subcontractor Coordinator or Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Roles: Sales Person]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Feature Details]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Activities]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Warehouses]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Notes]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Email Marketing Campaign]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Views]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Progress Invoicing]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Search]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Installing MS SQL Server 2008]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Finance charges/LateFees]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[How To Articles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Best Practices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Best Practices: FirePro]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Navigation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Record Navagation: Views]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[User Interface (GUI)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Interface: Modules and Sub Modules]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Interface: Buttons]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Dispatch]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utilities]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Reporting]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Company Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Module Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customizing Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Outlook and Exchange Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Outlook and Exchange Sync: Outlook Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Outlook and Exchange Sync: Exchange Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SQLink - For QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[WebConnect]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Field Service Overview]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[ Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Preparation for Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Install SQL for Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Installing Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Configuring Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Affiliates and Third Party Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Contacts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME: Service Management Enterprise]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME6.2 New Features]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME 7.0]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME Import Export Process]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[ SME Basics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SMP Install (Old)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Best Practices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[About This Manual]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1239</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1239"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T16:31:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Click the [[Wiki Books]] link for a more organized grouping of information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dispatch Guide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service &amp;amp; Install Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Service &amp;amp; Install Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projects]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Material Allocation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Packages]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Vendors]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Returns]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Transfers]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Invoicing]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payments]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 Wiki &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Welcome to High5 Wiki]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Introduction]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Support Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Administration and Setup]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Lookup Lists]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Backups]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[System Requirements]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Groups]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[What&amp;#039;s New 6.3 - Final Build]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[What&amp;#039;s New: What&amp;#039;s Coming]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Roles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Receptionist Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Dispatcher Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customer Service Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Administration and Setup Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Accounting and Bookkeeping Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customer Service Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Controller or Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Field Technician Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Project Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Order Entry Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Marketing Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Purchasing Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Manager or Owner using SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Technical Support Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Subcontractor Coordinator or Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Roles: Sales Person]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Feature Details]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Activities]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Warehouses]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Notes]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Email Marketing Campaign]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Views]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Progress Invoicing]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Search]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Installing MS SQL Server 2008]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Finance charges/LateFees]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[How To Articles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Best Practices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Best Practices: FirePro]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Navigation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Record Navagation: Views]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[User Interface (GUI)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Interface: Modules and Sub Modules]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Interface: Buttons]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Dispatch]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utilities]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Reporting]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Company Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Module Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customizing Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Outlook and Exchange Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Outlook and Exchange Sync: Outlook Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Outlook and Exchange Sync: Exchange Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SQLink - For QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[WebConnect]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Field Service Overview]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[ Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Preparation for Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Install SQL for Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Installing Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Configuring Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Affiliates and Third Party Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Contacts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME: Service Management Enterprise]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME6.2 New Features]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME 7.0]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME Import Export Process]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[ SME Basics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SMP Install (Old)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Best Practices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[About This Manual]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Service_%26_Install_Orders&amp;diff=1238</id>
		<title>Service &amp; Install Orders</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Service_%26_Install_Orders&amp;diff=1238"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T16:30:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The service or install order records the location of the job, specifies the work to be completed and includes products, services or labor hours required for the job. The order will show the billing address, the total order and tax amount, and related purchase orders.  An order is created for a customer. Material added to an order is linked to SME’s Inventory module. Labor added to an order is linked to SME’s Order Dispatch window.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Orientation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below are the different sections of a service or install order. Depending on the permissions your SME Administrator created, you may not have access to all the areas described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServiceAndInstall1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Create new order&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Search orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Navigate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Jump to order by order number&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;First, Next, Prior, Last&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Tab through orders&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Refresh&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Refresh window to see calculated fields update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Click to make changes to the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Delete the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print/Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Print or email the order. The printed orders, or reports, can be customized in the reports module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;2&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; -Open, Closed or Invoiced. Separate from the Order Status field on Details and Settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;3&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Action&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Close an order, invoice an order, or create PO for order. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Activities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- Set reminder activities for order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quick Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- Quickly generates an Itemized or Combined invoice. (To generate a Partial, Fixed Total, % of Total or Dollar Amt invoice, must use the Actions menu and select Generate Invoice.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4 - Access order details and customer information using these tabs. These tabs can be hidden for certain user groups as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5 - Select a filter to view open, closed, invoiced or all orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a new Service or Install Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;Nhip8RILqFI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new order from a customer record or directly in the Service or Install module. If you need to create an order for a new customer, first create the customer record, then create the order. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;From a customer record:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Open customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Service Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Install Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Action_New.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;From the Service or Install module:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window will open. Double click on the customer you want to create the order for.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       A new order is created. The customer information will populate the order such as site, billing and mailing information, the invoice type, the customer price book, and the customer’s tax group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;From anywhere in SME:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the menu at the top of SME.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Order or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can type &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ctrl+Alt+S&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to create a new service order, or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Ctrl+Alt+I&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to create a new install order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Menu.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Details and Setting Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site, billing and mailing information is pulled from the customer record.  On the right, there are fields specific for this order. Below is a description of the fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DetailsAndSettings.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - when the order is saved, the order number is populated. This is a unique number you can use to look up orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reference #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- The order number is populated into this field, but you can change it. This field is sometimes used to type a reference number you customer may want you to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Opened Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – auto-populated with the date you created the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Due Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – You can select a date this order is due. If the order is not closed by this date, the order will show as red on the dispatch board.  Note- Your SME Administrator may have changed the overdue color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date Dispatched&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Date field to select the date your technicians are dispatched. This field is not auto-populated and you must select the date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Closed Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – This field will be auto-populated with the date you close the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Priority&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select a priority and you can sort orders by priority in the Search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Type the related purchase order number for reference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Taken By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Name of SME user that created order will populate this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billing Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, the billing status drop down will be imported. Here you can void an order so it doesn’t sync with QuickBooks when invoiced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Closed By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Name of SME user that closed the order will populate this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the type of invoice you want to use for the order. See the Invoicing an Order section of this guide to read about your invoicing options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Your SME Administrator may have customized this drop down list. This field should reflect the milestones you move your orders through such as “materials ordered” or “ready to schedule”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SLA Category&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; –Allow you to designate the entire order into a Service Level Agreement category such as comprehensive, labor only, parts only, etc.  These categories are fully customizable by the SME Administrator. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Project&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the project you want this order to be added to. You can create new projects in Projects, in the Customer module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Not to Exceed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Type your order cost you should not exceed. You can compare it to the Total Cost field to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Total Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – This field is a calculated field and cannot be edited. It will show you your cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Work Requested Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are two sides to the Work Requested tab. On the Services Requested side, the left side, type the services your customer is requesting. This is information your technician will see on a service ticket. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServicesRequested.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the job has been completed, fill out the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services Performed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; side (the right side) with a description of what was completed. This information will show on the invoice that goes to your customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServicesPerformed1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Common Services&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your SME Administrator may have set up common services to use when filling out the work requested tab. Common services are templates which can be inserted into this tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Right click on either the Services Requested or Services Performed side.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Common Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the template name you want to insert&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CommonServices.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Items Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Order Items tab, you can add labor, materials and services to your order. On this tab, you can hide service, material or labor items from showing on the printed order. You can also rearrange the order of items on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderItemsTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Add labor to an order:&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Order Items tab, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Labor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the Labor Editor window will open. This is where you will enter the estimated hours required for your technicians, the hours you are billing the customer, the type of service they are performing, select the technician (if you know the technician) and the date of the service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LaborEditor.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the technician that will work on this order. If you don’t know who will do the work, select Unassigned and your dispatch manager will select the technician when the order is ready to schedule. If your SME Administrator set up Work Groups, you can filter your Technician list by selecting a Work Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Select the type of service you are charging the customer for. This updates the Unit Price field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payroll Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;– Select if your technician is performing regular hourly work, overtime work or other appropriate value. This updates the Unit Cost field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Scheduled Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Enter the hours you need to schedule for your technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Equal Billable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Check here if you want the billable qty to equal scheduled quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Billable Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Enter the hours you need to bill your customer for. If Equal Billable is checked, this field will be grayed out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If a price book is set for the customer, the Unit Price field will be auto-populated with the price defined in the price book. The price book overrides the service items, so changing the service item will not change the unit price.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;JvCGuIdHI0Q&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Add material to an order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       On the Order Items tab, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Material&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select Inventory Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window will open.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Double click on the item you need to add to the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Items to Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window will open. Notice the description of the material and the price and cost at the bottom. The cost is determined by the inventory item. The Price is determined first by the price in the inventory item, but if your customer has a price book assigned, the price book drives the cost.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Update the quantity if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The material is added to the order. You inventory manager will need to select stock or place a PO for material if you do not have stock for this item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; You SME Administrator may have associated labor hours with a material. If so, when you click OK on the Add Items to Order window, the Labor Editor window will open with the Scheduled Qty field populated with the hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Reserve Stock for Material on the Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;rFFy8FvqzWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Add a service to an order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your SME Administrator may have set up services which you can add to an order. Examples of a service might be “inspection level 1 service” or “hourly subcontractor work”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; When you add a service to an order, it will not show on the dispatch calendar. Only adding labor will show on the Order Dispatch window.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Add text to order items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add text to your order as shown in the image on the right. This can be used to group items on your order together under a description.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Text&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       A text line is entered on the Order &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Items tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Note the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is Text.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       On the line that was created, click in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Text&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column and type your text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:textOnOrderItems.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Rearrange order on Order Items tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click on the line you want to move.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click your cursor in the Sequence column.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Use the to change the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderOnOrderItems.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;If you don’t see a column for Sequence on the Order Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Right click the column header on the Order Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Columns to Grid&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the window that opens, drag the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sequence&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field and drop it in place on the Order Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Labor, Material and Services tabs&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The labor tab only shows labor for the order, the Materials tab only shows material for the order, and Services tab only shows service for the order. SME users that are responsible for dispatch may want to use the labor tab and only see labor items.  SME users that are responsible for inventory and ordering parts may want to use the Materials tab to only see material on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Item Repair Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In SME, you can create an order to repair equipment at the customer site. If your customer doesn’t have any equipment yet on site, then you won’t use this tab yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Create a new order for your customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Repair&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the Item Repair window, next to Customer EQ Item click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Your customer equipment list will open. Select the item that needs repair.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       The Item Repair window will populate with the item details.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Fill out the Repair Requested field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also create a new order for specific customer equipment in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; section of the Customers module. In &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, right click on the equipment and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Service Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The order will be created and the equipment listed on the Item Repair tab in the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ItemRepair.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Totals Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Totals tab you can see a summary of all your labor, service and material charges. Also included in the total are taxes, trip and freight charges, and prepaid amount used.  On the right you can see the invoice status, date, number and terms. Click Jump to Invoice to open the invoice in the invoicing module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrdersTotalsTab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rates and Assignments Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RatesAndAssignments.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;MsoTableGrid&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border-collapse: collapse; border: medium none&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: 1pt medium; border-style: solid none; border-color: black -moz-use-text-color; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price Book&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: 1pt medium; border-style: solid none; border-color: black -moz-use-text-color; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
If you assigned a price book to the customer, then when you create an order for a customer the order is automatically assigned the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Labor Rate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
This is pulled over from the customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Premium Hour&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
This is pulled over from the customer record. If you click on the Totals tab, you will see the Premium Hour in the Premium field.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Trip Charge&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
This is pulled over from the customer record. If you click on the Totals tab, you will see the Trip Charge in the Trip Charge field.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales Person&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Automatically populated with the Salesperson assigned to the company you are creating the order for. Use the drop down to change.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lead Tech.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Select the lead technician for this order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Primary Tech.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
When adding labor for this order, the Primary Tech will automatically populate the technician field in the Labor Editor. You set a company’s Primary Tech in the Customer record, Account tab.&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Secondary Tech&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
The secondary tech. is pulled from the customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Assigned To&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
The first technician you assigned in the technician field in the Labor Editor window for this order.&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;If you change the technician in the Labor Editor, the Assigned To field is not updated.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 90.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;121&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Class&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 603.9pt; border-width: medium medium 1pt; border-style: none none solid; border-color: -moz-use-text-color -moz-use-text-color black; -moz-border-top-colors: none; -moz-border-right-colors: none; -moz-border-bottom-colors: none; -moz-border-left-colors: none; -moz-border-image: none; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;805&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Pulls from the Class set in the Customer record, Account tab.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stored Documents ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Stored Documents tab you can link documents related to the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To link a new document&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, first make sure the document is saved. Your SME Administrator may have a specific folder you should save your linked SME documents in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    In the Stored &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Documents Options&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window, click  [[File:button1.jpg]] in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;File Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Browse to the saved file. Select the file and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Open&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#    It is optional to enter a description. Entering a description may make it easier to locate a specific file if you have multiple files linked in the Stored Documents tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Only check the Store document in database if your SME Administrator advises you to. If you check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Store document in database&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, your SME database has the potential to get very large. If you do not check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Store document in database&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, if you delete the document on the file server, SME will not be able to open the file anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print Service Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.      In the service or install order, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print/Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       In the list that displays, everything above the horizontal line are reports you can print. SME has standard reports you can view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrintOrder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Try selecting &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Order Ticket – Order Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       The report will open in a new window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.     Click the printer icon to print the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Close the Service or Install Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When your technicians have completed the work, you will want to update the order with the services performed, make sure the Billable Qty is accurate based on actual hours your technician worked and then close the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To update the order, first open the order. You can use the search button to find the order, or you can jump to the order from the Order Dispatch window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jump to order from Order Dispatch:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Open &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Day Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the order on your technician’s schedule that needs to be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Jump To&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the top of Order Dispatch and the order will open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If Jump To Service isn’t available in the Order Dispatch window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Preferences&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check Show &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Advanced Features in Dispatch Control&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preferences.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Update Services Performed&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Requested&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Type the work performed on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services Performed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; side, on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You may have common services set up for commonly performed services. Right click in the services performed field, select common services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Update Actual Labor Hours on Labor Editor&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Labor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the labor item and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The Labor Editor will open.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Update the Billable Qty field with the hours worked, or the amount you want to bill the customer for.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Confirm the type of service selected in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Close the Order&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       The order is set to Closed and will show at the top of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Information Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Customer Information tab you can access contact information for the company, view customer equipment, view service and install order history for the customer, and view invoices and payments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerInformation.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Customer Information, Account and Installation tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tab shows you account information for the customer on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Section 1&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;MsoTableGrid&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;border-collapse: collapse; border: medium none&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;height: 13pt&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 81.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt; height: 13pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Account #&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 612.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt; height: 13pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;817&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Pulled from Customer &amp;gt; Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 81.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Current Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 612.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;817&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Pulled from&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Status field on the Customer &amp;gt; Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 81.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Last Service&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 612.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;817&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Pulled from&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;  &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Customer &amp;gt; Accounts tab&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 81.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales Person&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 612.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;817&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Pulled from Customer &amp;gt; Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 81.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Contact Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 612.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;817&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Pulled from Customer &amp;gt; Details and Settings &amp;gt; Site tab&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 81.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Business Type&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 612.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;817&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Pulled from Customer &amp;gt; Accounts tab&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 81.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Comments&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 612.9pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;817&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
Pulled from Printed Comments field on Customer &amp;gt; Accounts tab&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 95.4pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;2&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;127&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 599.4pt; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;799&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;width: 9.65in; padding: 0in 5.4pt&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;926&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Section 2 – &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Pulled from the Customer &amp;gt; Install Info tab&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Section3 &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;– Pulled from the Customer &amp;gt; Account tab&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Customer Information, Lists tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can view all contacts for the customer and view customer equipment, IP addresses, phone lines, and systems. Your SME Administrator may have hidden some of the tabs shown in the screenshot to simply the interface for your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Customer Information, Activities tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can view your customers order history, invoice and payment history, and view your customers deposits and prepaid hours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Taxes Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
View the tax details on the Taxes tab. The Tax Group/Code is assigned in the customer record. When you create an order for a customer, the TaxGroup/Code will be populated by what is assigned in the customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Taxes_Tab.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Invoicing an Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
o find the orders that are ready to be invoiced, you will need to search for all closed orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find all closed orders:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Closed Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The Search Closed Orders window will open.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Double click on an order to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then use the same tools for searching closed orders as you can with searching open orders. (e.g. adding columns, adding filters) Click Find Orders for instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;To create an invoice for an order:&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Quick Invoice&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For orders with the invoice type of Full-Itemized or Combined, you can click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quick Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and an invoice is generated and the order status moves to “invoiced”. To see the invoice, go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoicing&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Receivables module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QuickInvoiceButton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions &amp;gt; Generate Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For any invoice type you can click Actions and select Generate Invoice.  To see the invoice, go to Invoicing in the Receivables module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, the invoice will also be in QuickBooks after your next sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Types of invoices you can generate&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;b4ETBOoSBkU&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you generate the invoice, you can select the invoice type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InvoiceType.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;$- Dollar Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Will allow conversion to multiple orders based on dollar amounts. It will keep track of how much has been converted towards the total.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;% - % of Total&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Convert based on percentage of the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Combined&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This converts the entire order to a combined invoice.  This is a good option for good tracking because all the details are in the order rather than replicated on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fixed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – Fixed Total - The totals will be fixed and will NOT use the itemized details.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Full – Itemized&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Converting an order to an Itemized Invoice will duplicate all the items on the invoice for further editing.  This will give more flexibility in changing the invoice after it’s created.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Partial&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This allows selection of individual items for the order or invoice.  This is good for converting a proposal to multiple install orders that will be a multiple phase project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; For more information on invoicing, refer to the Receivables guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating Order Templates ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you find that you are creating the same service or install order frequently, you may want to create a template for the order to save time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create the template:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Open an existing order or create and save a new order you want to use as a template.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save as Template&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Type the template name in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save As Template&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;The template is created. Now to generate another order with this template:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to Service or Install.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create From Template&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select the template in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select template to apply to order window&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window will open. Double click on the company you want to create the order for.&lt;br /&gt;
#       The order is created based on the template selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Template.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the template, you must edit the original order you created the template from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applying Prepaid Services and Prepaid Hours ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ED872D&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepaid Hours&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a customer prepaid for hours, you will need to enter the amount they prepaid in the customer record. When adding labor to any service or install order, if there is a balance left on the prepaid hours you will be able to reference it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to the customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Activities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepaid Hours&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrepaidHoursTAb.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Enter the customers prepaid amounts in the Prepaid Hours window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date and Taken By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be auto-populated. Change as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – hours of labor pre-paid for&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- hourly rate&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Total&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – this field calculates the total amount paid.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a customer has prepaid hours available, when adding labor to a work order, the prepaid balance will display (circled in the image below).  Fill out the Labor Editor as you normally would, but make sure you update the hours used in the circled field. This will reduce the prepaid hours balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrepaidHours.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ED872D&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepaid Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to the customer record.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Activities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Prepaid Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Enter the customers prepaid amounts in the Prepaid Services window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrepaidServicesWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Date and Taken By&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; will be auto-populated. Change as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – hours of service&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;- hourly rate&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Total&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – this field calculates the total amount paid.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next time you add a service to an order for this company, there will be an additional field (circled below) showing Prepaid Items in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Item Editor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PrepaidServiceItems.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1237</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=1237"/>
		<updated>2011-06-15T16:28:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;173.10.69.157: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Click the [[Wiki Books]] link for a more organized grouping of information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dispatch Guide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service &amp;amp; Install Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Service &amp;amp; Install Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Recurring Orders]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Projects]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Inventory]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Material Allocation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Packages]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Vendors]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Returns]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Transfers]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables Module Guide&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Invoicing]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Payments]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Recurring Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Batch Print/Email Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 Wiki &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Welcome to High5 Wiki]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Introduction]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Support Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Administration and Setup]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Lookup Lists]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Backups]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[System Requirements]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Groups]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[What&amp;#039;s New 6.3 - Final Build]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[What&amp;#039;s New: What&amp;#039;s Coming]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Roles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Receptionist Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Dispatcher Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customer Service Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Administration and Setup Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Accounting and Bookkeeping Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customer Service Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Controller or Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Field Technician Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Project Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Order Entry Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Marketing Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Purchasing Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Manager or Owner using SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Technical Support Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Subcontractor Coordinator or Manager Role]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Roles: Sales Person]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Feature Details]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Activities]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Inventory Warehouses]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Notes]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Email Marketing Campaign]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Views]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Progress Invoicing]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Search]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Installing MS SQL Server 2008]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Finance charges/LateFees]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[How To Articles]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Best Practices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Best Practices: FirePro]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Navigation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Record Navagation: Views]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[User Interface (GUI)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Interface: Modules and Sub Modules]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[User Interface: Buttons]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Dispatch]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utilities]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Reporting]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Company Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Module Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Customizing Reports]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Outlook and Exchange Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Outlook and Exchange Sync: Outlook Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Outlook and Exchange Sync: Exchange Sync]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SQLink - For QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[WebConnect]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Field Service Overview]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[ Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[SME Preparation for Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Install SQL for Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Installing Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Configuring Field Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Affiliates and Third Party Services]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Contacts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME: Service Management Enterprise]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME6.2 New Features]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME 7.0]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SME Import Export Process]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[ SME Basics]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SMP Install (Old)]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## [[Best Practices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# [[About This Manual]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>173.10.69.157</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>